TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Premium Security System) — If Equipped . . . . .16
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Key Positions
Three Button Key
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
outlets, and removable console (if equipped), will remain
active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
2
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Shaft Lock Module (Vehicles Equipped with
Premium Security System) — If Equipped
The shaft lock module is located inside the steering
column. The module works in conjunction with the
Sentry Key to prevent the steering shaft from rotating if
someone inserts an invalid ignition key into the ignition
lock cylinder in the instrument panel.
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed and needs to be cut.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
2
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry
key, contact your dealer for details.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Rearming of the System — If Equipped
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
To Arm the System:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The
door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
2
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
ing.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter
Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed
Sentry Key.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the panic alarm from distances up to
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio trans-
mitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the but-
tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control
is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top
position).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Two (2) transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
equipped from the factory with three button transmitters
and those built with power options will be equipped
with six button transmitters.
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed,
the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights
will flash on twice.
2
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
driver’s door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s
Door 1st?” under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC
section of this manual.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on your key fob.
Sound Horn On Lock
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off by using the following procedure:
4. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the UNLOCK button.
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Sound Horn On Lock?”
under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of
this manual.
5. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
6. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
•
On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to
open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2
seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed
while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will
reverse to the full open position.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button will result in the
liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you
to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate
is closed.
4. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
5. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock
The Flash Lights With Lock or Unlock feature can be
turned on or off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Flash Lights On Lock/
Unlock?” under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC
section of this manual.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will func-
tion normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security
system on vehicles so equipped.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons at the
same time.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
4. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
5. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for assistance.
2
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat-
tery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a small
screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of
the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
rubber gasket during removal.
Separating Transmitter Halves
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves together. Make sure there is an even “gap” be-
tween the two halves. Test transmitter operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
DOOR LOCKS
If the lock knob is up when you shut the door, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each
door trim panel.
2
WARNING!
•
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
If desired, the “Auto Door Locks?” feature can be turned
on or off by using the following procedure:
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times; ending in the LOCK position (Do not start the
engine).
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Auto Door Locks?” under
“Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of this
manual.
2
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
Auto Door Locks Programming
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of Park with all doors
closed) and then shifted back into the Park position.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock). If
desired, the “Auto Unlock On Exit?” feature can be
turned on or off by using the following procedure:
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Auto Unlock On Exit?”
under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of
this manual.
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
2
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
Child Lock Control
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key (or any
similar item) into the child lock control and slide it
upward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After engaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock knob to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key (or any
similar item) into the child lock control and slide it
downward.
WARNING!
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock on the opposite rear door.
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WINDOWS
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on
the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen-
ger windows will be disabled.
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows. The switches will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
2
Auto Down Feature
All the power window switches have an auto down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The time is customer programmable through the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Power Accessory Delay?” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window.
NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Reset
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after
vehicle power is restored:
2
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
To open the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and turn
to the right. On vehicles equipped with power locks the
liftgate can also be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry or by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once unlocked, on vehicles equipped with power locks,
the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the
key. To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release
switch located on the underside of the license plate bar
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE:
•
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
•
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate
becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to
manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the lift-
gate is closed.
Liftgate Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
2
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
button located on the overhead console.
Power Liftgate Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the remote button is pressed the “Lamp Flash”
feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to signal that
the liftgate is opening or closing. A beeping signal will
sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or
close.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
any of the close buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not
fully open, press the open button to fully open the
liftgate and then press close.
•
If the liftgate release switch is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
•
•
The power liftgate switches will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
2
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below Ϫ12° F (Ϫ24° C) or temperatures above 143° F
(62° C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflat-
able knee blocker. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the
LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this
manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
2
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
Latch Plate To Buckle
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
2
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belt buckles for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners are designed to work for all
size occupants.
2
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Belt Alert Programming
(BeltAlert) — Driver Front Seat Only
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced
Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle
their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is
triggered, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
ON/RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position,
and buckle the driver’s seat belt.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reacti-
vated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(engine does not need to be running), and wait for the
Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt each time,
while unbuckling and re-buckling the seat belt.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and stow it.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low
speed collisions.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
“Occupant Classification System” in this section).
2
This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflat-
able knee blocker located on the instrument panel below
the steering column.
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
window bags to protect the driver and passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. These protec-
tive covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
Front airbags, along with seat belts, and front seat belt
buckle pretensioners, work with the instrument panel
knee blockers to provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Left and right window bags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
•
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the side curtain
airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including adding
a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to “Occupant Classification Sys-
tem” in this section) has determined the seat is empty or
is occupied by a child.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If your vehicle is equipped, the window bag on the crash
side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side
collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags inflate,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (refer to section on Child Restraint)
should be secured in the rear seat, in a child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat appropriate for the size and
age of the child. Older children who do not use a child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat should ride
properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their
arm.
2
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
4. If your vehicle has left and right window bags, do
not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Airbag System Components
•
•
•
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Knee Impact Bolster
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
AIRBAG Light
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
2
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS) — If Equipped
Driver Airbag
−
−
−
−
−
Occupant Classification Module
Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
Interconnecting Wiring
Front Passenger Airbag
Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags (If Equipped)
Front Impact Sensors
Bladder Assembly
Side Impact Sensors (If Equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Belt Tension Sensor
•
Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners
Interconnecting Wiring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Airbag System Works
column, instrument panel and passenger knee bol-
sters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
severity, the front control module determines the
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.
•
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn-
ing light and PAD indicator light in the
center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
•
The ORC may modify the rate of inflation based on the
occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification
Module.
first turned on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG
warning light will turn off. The PAD indicator light
will function normally (Refer to “Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) Indicator Light” in this section). If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momen-
tarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the
light comes on again after initial start up.
•
•
The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully
inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
2
The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and
impact sensors detects a collision requiring the air-
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity and occupant size. The steering
wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
and the side impact sensors (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The win-
dow bag is only about 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) thick when it
is inflated.
•
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable
indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant
Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will
classify an occupant into a size category based on
sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occu-
pants should try to remain in a normally seated
position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dash-
board), the OCS may not be able to properly approxi-
mate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size
may appear to increase or decrease due to objects
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat.
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat-
able Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best inter-
action with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds,
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity,
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used.
OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the center of
the instrument panel above the climate controls.)
2
If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will illuminate indicating that you should
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence
of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD
indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illumi-
nated the airbag will be disabled.
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the
event of a collision for occupants classified into the
empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light
will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag
will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small
teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the
airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a
collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use
the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passen-
ger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
seat until the light goes out.
restraint to the rear seat. A deploying passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear
facing infant seat.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into one of three size categories
based on the input from the Bladder Assembly and
Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories include empty,
child, and adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Clas-
sification to the ORC to identify if a front passenger
airbag is allowed. If a fault is present, the AIRBAG
warning light is illuminated.
Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the
passenger front airbag will not inflate. For almost all
properly installed child restraints, the “PAD Indicator
Light” will be illuminated indicating that the front pas-
senger airbag is turned off and will not inflate. If the
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated, DO NOT
assume the airbag is turned off and move the child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
•
•
The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
airbag is turned OFF in the presence of a properly
seated occupant. When the PAD indicator light is
illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) detects either an
empty seat of a weight less than the predetermined
occupant threshold, the ORC will not illuminate the
PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned
off. When the OCS detects an adult the PAD indicator
light will be off, and the airbag will be enabled.
•
The Bladder Assembly is located beneath the seat
cushion foam. The pressure sensor sends a signal to
the OCM.
2
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the
outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS generates
a signal based on outboard lap belt tension. This signal
is sent to the OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder
pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does
not cause a small occupant to be classified as a larger
occupant.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
•
•
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
If A Deployment Occurs
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers,
and then immediately deflate.
2
•
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
WARNING!
Deployed airbags, front seat belt buckle pretension-
ers and driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect
you in another collision. Have the airbags, front seat
belt buckle pretensioners and driver inflatable knee
blocker replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Also, have the Occupant Classification
System serviced as well.
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause
it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because
the airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the
components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag
system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including re-
moval or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for per-
sons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response
If the airbags and seat belt pretensioners deploy after an
impact and the electrical system remains functional,
vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock
automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds
after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights
will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
•
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
WARNING!
•
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
2
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler
Corporation and others to learn more about the possible
causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to
assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to
crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo-
ration, such investigations may be requested by custom-
ers, insurance carriers, government officials, and profes-
sional crash researchers, such as those associated with
universities, and with hospital and insurance organiza-
tions.
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
2. Used in defense of litigation involving
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
2
•
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a seat appropriate for their age and size.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the
front.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Seat belt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)
Cruise control status
Traction/stability control status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil-
dren (LATCH)” later in this section.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
Infants and Child Restraints
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster seat
are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
2
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child can not sit
with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
•
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
2
•
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with two child restraint anchor-
age systems called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH child
restraint anchorage systems are installed on second-row
seats only. LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are
not provided on the six passenger third row seats.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Six passenger vehicles are equipped with second row
fold & tumble seats with lower anchorages that can
accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing-mounted
LATCH-compatible child seats. The third row seating
positions are not equipped with lower anchorages. How-
ever, the third row driver side seating position is
equipped with a tether anchor. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in any third row
seating position, you must use the vehicle’s seat belt.
Fold & Tumble Seat Latch Anchorages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Five passenger vehicles are equipped with a second row
bench seat only. The two outboard seating positions have
lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or
flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-compatible child
seats. The center seating position of the bench seat can
also accommodate a flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-
compatible child seat by using the inboard lower anchors
of the two outboard seating positions. A rigid mount seat
can only be installed at this seating location by using the
vehicle’s seat belt. Regardless of the specific type of lower
attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child
seats such that two child seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position.
2
Bench Seat LATCH Anchors
The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located
where the seat back meets the seat cushion. The tether
anchors are located on the rear surface of the seat. Child
restraint systems designed to be compatible with the
vehicles LATCH System are now available. LATCH child
restraints make installation into the vehicle simple and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
convenient. When using the LATCH System, always
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s installation in-
structions.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Tether Anchors
There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row
seating positions and for six passenger vehicles on the
driver’s side third row seating position. The tether an-
chors are located in the rear surface of the seat. When
using the tether anchorages in the second row fold &
tumble seating positions and in the outboard second row
bench seating positions, ensure that the strap is routed
over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint
between the head restraint posts.
Fold & Tumble Seat Tether Strap Routing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
When the tether anchorage is used in the center second
row bench seating position or on the third row seating
position, where equipped, the strap should be positioned
straight over the top of the seatback.
When the tether anchorage is used in the third row
seating position, the strap should be positioned straight
over the top of the seatback.
2
Third Row Tether Strap Routing
Bench Seat Tether Strap Routing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing A Child Restraint
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
The center seating position on vehicles equipped with a
second row bench seat is equipped with an Automatic-
Locking Retractor (ALR). Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
about the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacturer.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturer’s
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
2
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
WARNING!
Airbag Light
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans-
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Tires
2
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
▫
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Inside Day / Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind
you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light will illuminate to
indicate when this feature is on.
MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
3
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
CAUTION!
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
Use the mirror select switch, located on the driver’s door
trim panel above the power window switches, to adjust
the view obtained in the outside mirrors.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right
mirror selection. Use the center off position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Sun Visor Extension
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
3
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ or ЉDial”
ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in section 3 of this manual.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
UConnect™ Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
3
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ЉSetupЉ and then
ЉPhone Pairing,Љ the following compound command
can be said: ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID on
certain radios.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ЉPhonebook New Entry,Љ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Entry.Љ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
ЉCancelЉ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ follow-
ing the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE:
•
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
•
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
www.jeep.com/uconnect
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ЉAdvanced Phone
ConnectivityЉ).
3
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone PairingЉ and follow the audible prompts.
•
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ЉPair a
PhoneЉ and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ЉJohn Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ЉAdd Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,Љ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉDial.Љ
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
•
For example, you can say Љ234-567-8901.Љ
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.Љ
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ЉRobert SmithЉ or ЉRobertЉ
instead of ЉBob.Љ
3
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
ЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ or ЉPagerЉ). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Edit.Љ
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
•
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Delete.Љ
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉList
NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ЉVoice RecognitionЉ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ЉDelete.Љ
ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ЉPhonebook EditЉ feature.
•
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
To call one of the names in the list, press the ЉVoice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ЉCall.Љ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ operations at this point.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
3
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook List Names.Љ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉDialЉ or
ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ЉToggling Between Calls.Љ To combine two calls, refer
to ЉConference Call.Љ
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
To put a call on hold, press the ЈPhone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ЈPhone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Toggling Between Calls
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ЈPhone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
3
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Redial
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉRedial.Љ
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ЉMaking a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.Љ After the second call has
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
UConnect™ System Features
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
•
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
3
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉEmergencyЉ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉTowing Assistance.Љ
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ЉWorking with Automated
Systems.Љ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ЉSend.Љ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSendЉ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ЉWorking
with Automated Systems.Љ
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
Phone and Network Status Indicators
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,Љ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ЉPair a PhoneЉ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute-off.Љ
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number Љ#121,Љ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
Advanced Phone Connectivity
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ЉTransfer Call.Љ
•
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute.Љ
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ
with one electronic device at a time.
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ЈVoice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
3
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Select PhoneЉ and follow the prompts.
•
When prompted, say ЉList Phones.Љ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
•
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
At the next prompt, say ЉDeleteЉ and follow the
prompts.
Performance is maximized under:
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
•
•
•
•
low road noise,
•
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
•
•
You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) for Љ0Љ (zero). Љ800Љ must be
spoken Љeight-zero-zero.Љ
3
•
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Љsend.Љ
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
•
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
smooth road surface,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
fully closed windows, and
dry weather condition.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ЉonЉ mode.
Operation from driver seat.
•
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
North American English
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Primary
Zero
Alternate(s)
Oh
Add new
All of them
Confirmations prompts
Delete
Select language
List all
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con-
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment
and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment.
Add location
All
Confirmation prompts
Delete a name
Language
List names
List paired phones
Pager
List phones
Beeper
Phone pairing
Phonebook
Return to main menu
Select phone
Set up
Pairing
Phone book
Return. Main menu
select
Phone settings phone set
up
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat
WARNING!
The front passenger power seat switches are located on
the passenger front door trim panel. The bottom switch
controls forward and rearward adjustment. The top
switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured.
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con-
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release
tab located at the base of the head restraint and push
down on the head restraint.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the door trim panel next to the power seat
switches.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Front Heated Seat Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low)
and press the switch a second time in the same direction
to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show
when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.
The controls for the second row heated seats are located
on the center console between the seats. Press the switch
once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the
switch a second time in the same direction to turn the
heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW
or HIGH heat is ON.
3
Rear Heated Seat Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If the lights in the second row heated seat switch begin
to flash when the switch is pressed, it indicates that the
heated seat is not functioning properly and that ser-
vice is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
•
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
2 to 3 minutes.
The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE: When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd
row seat folded down, the second row seat may need to
be adjusted forward to achieve full recline.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
3
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured.
Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped
The second row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push the seatback forward.
Seatback Release Handle
To raise the second row seat, lift up on the seatback and
push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the
seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
4. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat labeled “1” and fold the
seatback down.
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row
seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the
seat may occur.
3
Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped
The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward
for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position
and rotate the arm rest to the upright position.
Seatback Release Lever
To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
3. Move the seat to the full rear position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull up on the release handle labeled “2” and lift
firmly to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat
contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat
forward.
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped
For passengers sitting in the third row seats, the second
row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy
exit.
Seat Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
To fold and tumble the seat forward, follow these steps:
1. Pull up on the seatback release handle “1” located on
the back of the seat to fold the seatback down.
3
Release Strap 2 Location
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
Release Handle 1 Location
2. Pull the release strap “2” located at the bottom of the
seat to lift and tumble the seat forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Seating — If Equipped
The third row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
WARNING!
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded
and tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push it forward.
To raise the 3rd row seat, lift up on the seatback and push
rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback
forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat
cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat
may occur.
Seat Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Load Floor — If Equipped
WARNING!
For additional cargo space, the second and third row
seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor
extended to cover the center console.
•
Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same.
Head restraints from one seating position should
not be removed and installed in any other seating
position. In a collision, serious injury or death may
result if the proper head restraint is not installed on
each seat.
To extend the load floor, follow these steps:
3
1. Move the second row seats to the full rear position.
2. Fold the second and third row seatbacks down.
•
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not
be used as a play area by children. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should be
seated and using the proper restraint system.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the
driver’s second row seatback over the center console and
onto the passenger second row seat.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats. The
floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
Load Floor Panel
Grocery Bag Holders
NOTE: Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load
floor panel when not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The memory seat buttons located on the driver’s door
will always recall stored settings. The remote keyless
entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed. Refer to the
following procedure on how to link a remote keyless
entry transmitter to a position.
If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems, your
remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons
on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the
driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and radio station presets to saved positions.
3
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall memory positions press memory button number
1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one
or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the
memory position for driver two. A recall can be cancelled
by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the seat stops moving and a
delay of approximately one second will occur before any
other recalls can be selected.
Driver Memory Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless
entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked
to either memory position. Up to eight remote keyless
entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle. The
memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight
transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat
positions or any combination of the two positions.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
7. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
To Program Memory Seat Buttons & RKE
Transmitters, Follow These Steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and
enter “Yes”.
8. Within 5 seconds, press and release the LOCK button
on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters. A
chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has
been successfully linked. A message will also be dis-
played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been linked.
3. Use the seat, mirror and adjustable pedal switches to
adjust the seat, recliner, side view mirrors and adjustable
pedals to the desired positions.
4. Set the radio station presets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Repeat the above steps for the second position using the
other driver’s door numbered button and Remote Key-
less Entry Transmitter.
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button are
pressed, you erase the old memory and store a new one.
3
5. Within 5 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitters. A chime
will sound signaling you that the transmitter link has
been successfully disabled. A message will also be dis-
played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been disabled.
To Disable A Transmitter Link, Follow These Steps:
1. Select “Remote Linked To Memory” from the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center, Customer Program-
mable features.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1
or 2, repeat steps 1– 4 for each transmitter.
3. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
NOTE: This function can be selected using the “Cus-
tomer Programmable Features” in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) section, Otherwise see your
authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move
forward to the memory/driving position when the
key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the
LOCK position.
There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjust-
ments available:
The Easy Entry and Easy Exit feature will be automati-
cally disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than
2.5 inches (60 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this
position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the
seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
•
The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 inches (60 mm) if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 4.72 inches (120 mm) forward
of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is
placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Exit Seat feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Exit
Seat feature can be enabled or disabled through the
customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Easy Exit
Seat?” under “Use Factory Settings”.
•
The seat shall move to the position located 1 1/8
inches (30 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting
position is between 2.5 inches to 4.72 inches (60 mm to
120 mm) forward of the rear stop when the key is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
This additional feature provides automatic outside mir-
ror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
3
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the
customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse?” under “Use Factory Settings”.
Hood Release Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the
front edge of the hood, near the center.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15
cm (6 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
3
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON
to restore the interior light operation.
Multi-Function Lever
The Multi-Function Lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Multi-Function Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight, park
light and instrument panel light operation.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dim-
mer control is in this position.
3
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Lever up
or down.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom “OFF” position. The in-
terior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Lever upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens
the odometer and radio display when
the parking lights or headlights are on
during daylight conditions.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
Automatic Headlights
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the third
detent position. When the system is ON, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your head-
lights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF,
turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the OFF
position.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
3
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator bulb is defective.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the Multi-Function Lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch the
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever a second time
to switch the headlights to LOW beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the end
of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Windshield Washers
To use the front washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regu-
lated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The switch on the right side of the steering column also
controls operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
3
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL (Delay)
position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper.
Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function
in any of the three positions. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever is pressed. Upon
release, the rear wiper will cycle two times before return-
ing to the set position.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
TILT STEERING COLUMN
WARNING!
To tilt the column, pull the lever, located behind the turn
signal control, toward you and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel firmly in place.
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
3
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) /
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
Tilt Steering Column Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” modes.
The ESP / TCS Indicator Lamp, located in the instrument
cluster, will light up when the Traction Control is in use.
To turn the system OFF, press the ESP “OFF” switch
located on center console next to the ash tray, until the
Traction Control Indicator in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Traction Control Switch
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the Traction Control Indicator turns OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE:
•
The Traction Control Indicator comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
•
The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
3
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
Rear Park Assist Indicator
When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for
objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in
the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59
inches (150 cm). A warning display above the rear
window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the distance of the object.
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red
LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of
the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind
the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs
either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the
display above the rear window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
59 in. (150 cm)
47 in. (120 cm)
39 in. (100 cm)
31.5 in. (80 cm)
25.5 in. (65 cm)
20 in. (50 cm)
16 in. (40 cm)
12 in. (30 cm)
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
8th LED
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
None
None
None
None
None
31.5 in. (80 cm)
25.5 in. (65 cm)
20 in. (50 cm)
16 in. (40 cm)
6 in. (15 cm)
None
at 12 in. (30 cm) Intermittent
at 8 in. (20 cm) Continuous
Red
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Assist
System should only be used as a parking aid and
is unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small objects. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity to the rear of the
vehicle.
3
Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display
turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist
System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is detected. It is recommended that the driver look
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park
Assist System.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Cam-
era feature:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
1. Start the engine.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
2. Place shift lever in R (Reverse).
3. Wait three seconds, and the camera view will display
on the Navigation Screen.
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the
rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
NOTE: The camera view will display only while the
vehicle is in R (Reverse).
REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
4. Perform a visual check of the rear area.
Vehicles with Navigation may be equipped with a Rear
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image (on the
navigation screen) of the rear of your vehicle whenever it
is put into R (Reverse). The camera is located in the light
bar of the rear license plate.
NOTE: CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before
backing up.
5. Backup as necessary.
6. Place the sift lever in P (Park) or D (Drive) to exit the
Rear Backup Camera system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera System
should only be used as a parking aid and is unable
to view every obstacle, or object in your drive path.
3
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using the Rear Camera System to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver look over his/her
shoulder when using the Rear Camera System.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next
to the power seat switches.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat
feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory
seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used to
recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions.
•
•
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
3
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. A message
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be ad-
justed when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad-
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
To Activate:
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h). The
speed control switches are located on the steering wheel.
Push the “ON/OFF” button once and the CRUISE indi-
cator located near the instrument cluster odometer will
illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is
on. To turn the system OFF, push the “ON/OFF” button
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
Speed Control Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To Set At A Desired Speed:
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
“ACCEL/RESUME” button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the “SET” button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. The
CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument clus-
ter odometer will illuminate showing the electronic
speed control is set.
To Vary the Speed Setting:
3
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the “ACCEL/RESUME” button.
When the button is released, a new set speed will be
established.
NOTE: While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will
only function in third or fourth gear.
Tapping the “ACCEL/RESUME” button once will result
in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button
is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button
three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the “CANCEL”
button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory.
Pushing the “ON/OFF” button to the OFF position or
turning off the ignition erases the speed memory.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and
hold the “COAST” button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the “COAST” button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descend-
ing downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading
lights, an optional universal garage door opener
(HomeLink), storage for sunglasses, optional power
sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
3
The lights also turn on when a front door, a rear door or
the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
Overhead Console
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
NOTE: The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis-
abled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Programming HomeLink
WARNING!
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. Some vehicles may
require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or
ЉAccessoryЉ) position for programming and/or operation
of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient train-
ing and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
3
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures
a
driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLink system messages.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
seconds and do not repeat Step One to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until Step
Four has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ЉGate Operator/Canadian Pro-
grammingЉ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter and the
EVIC display will show “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash or
the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.
Homelink Buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train”
repeat steps 2–4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light or the EVIC display. If the
indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and your device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released. If the EVIC
display shows “Channel X Transmit” (where X is Chan-
nel 1, 2, or 3), programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
(rolling code system). If your garage door is the “rolling
code” type, please proceed to the heading “Programming
A Rolling Code System.”
Programming A Rolling Code System
3
1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ Step Two. Do not repeat
Step One.
2. Firmly press and release the ЉlearnЉ or ЉsmartЉ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manu-
facturer.)
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage
door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage
door opener may have a multiple security code system
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step
Three.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ؆press/hold/release؆ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to Љtime-outЉ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ЉProgram-
mingЉ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
؆Programming HomeLink؆ Step Three with the follow-
ing:
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
ЉcyclingЉ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (ЉcycleЉ)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly and the EVIC
display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with ЉProgrammingЉ Step
Four to complete.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ Step Two. Do not repeat
Step One. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to Љtime-outЉ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Using HomeLink
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ЉPro-
grammingЉ - Step Two.
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
3
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds
and the EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then
change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with ЉProgrammingЉ Step
Two.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ЉreprogrammedЉ -
note below), follow the step noted:
•
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash and the EVIC display
shows “Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
In the event that you are still having programming
difficulties, questions, or comments, contact HomeLink
at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instruc-
tions in this section.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Power Sunroof buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Press and hold the “OPEN” button rearward to fully
open the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any
position between closed and full open. Momentarily
pressing the “OPEN” button rearward will activate the
Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically.
Express Open Feature
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or
comfort stop position. This feature is designed to elimi-
nate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph
(32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press
the “OPEN” button rearward to activate the Express
Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the
comfort stop position. Pressing the button rearward
again will fully open the sunroof.
3
Press and hold the “VENT” button to open the vent. The
sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed
and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position,
press and hold the “CLOSE” button forward. Releasing
the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the
sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the
button is pushed forward again.
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
NOTE: The power sunroof buttons remain active for up
to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To close the sunroof, press and hold the “CLOSE” button
forward. Again, any release of the button will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the button is pushed forward again.
WARNING!
•
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating
the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death. Don’t leave the
keys in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
•
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Wind Buffeting
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the instru-
ment panel below the radio. The driver’s side outlet is
controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger side
outlet is connected directly to the battery. The driver’s side
outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package).
3
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Front Power Outlets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third outlet is located on the back of the front center
console near the floor, and is also controlled by the
ignition switch.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
A fourth outlet is located on the driver’s side, in the rear
cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch.
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from
the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
battery symbol indicating the power source. The passen-
ger side instrument panel and center console outlets are
powered directly from the battery, items plugged into
these outlets may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
The passenger side and center console outlets are protected
by an automatic reset circuit breaker. The automatic circuit
breaker restores power when the overload is removed.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
NOTE: If desired, the fourth power outlet in the rear cargo
area can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide
power with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
CUPHOLDERS
Second Row Seat Cupholders
On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the
seatback armrest. Pull down on the armrest to access the
cupholders. Push the armrest up when the cupholders
are no longer needed.
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. Push down on the forward edge of the
console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up
when the cupholders are no longer needed.
3
Five Passenger Seating Cupholders
Six Passenger Seating Cupholders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in the forward
edge of the center console located between the second
row seats. Push down on the forward edge of the console
to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the
cupholders are no longer needed.
Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped
The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo
area. To open lift up on the handle.
Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped
There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for
the third row seat passengers.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue
holder mounted on the underside of the cover. The
bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders
for compact discs or cassette tapes.
Rear Storage Bin
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
To cover the cargo area:
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place.
3
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the second row seat-
backs.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
Stowed Position
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed posi-
tion and lock into place.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks.
WARNING!
•
•
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control result-
ing in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
•
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
3
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Roof Rack
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross bars are not in use, move both cross bars next to
each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most
position.
To move the cross bars, press the upper edge of each
cross bar button, then move the cross bar to the desired
position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
This is can be done with one person standing on each
side of the vehicle, moving the cross bar at the same time.
Once the cross bar is in place, press the lower edge of the
cross bar button to lock it into position.
The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
•
•
•
•
Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel at
any luggage rack position for proper function. Non-
compliance could result in damage to the luggage rack,
cargo and/or vehicle.
3
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lbs
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal
area should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
CAUTION!
1. Voltage Light
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads
“H”, pull over in a safe area as soon as possible and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4. Turn Signal Indicators
WARNING!
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
4
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level
reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons (7 to 15 liters)
this light will remain on until fuel is added.
6. Anti-Lock Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem. The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
7. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anit-lock brake system.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
8. Traction Control Indicator — If Equipped
This display indicator illuminates momentarily
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON.
The traction control Indicator will turn on if:
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
•
•
The traction control system is in use.
4
The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
the system OFF.
•
•
There is a Traction Control System malfunction.
The system has been deactivated to prevent damage
to the brake system due to overheated brake tem-
peratures.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake
system and is a normal condition. The system will remain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
off the Traction Control Light.
12. AutoStick Light
This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift
lever is moved to the AutoStick position.
9. Tachometer
13. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle
ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct
mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the
odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement,
be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the
service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
10. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. The word TRIP
and either “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome-
ters. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom-
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately 2 seconds).
11. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster
odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
4
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
14. Cruise Indicator
This display indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
15. Malfunction Indicator Light
16. High Beam Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The light will illu-
minate when the key is in the ON position before engine
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the Multi-Function lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Navigation Screen / Rear View Camera — If
Equipped
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi-
gation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ЉEnhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
minder System (BeltAlert™)Љ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
The Rear View Camera system uses the Navigator Screen
to display the area behind the vehicle. Camera view will
display only while the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
21. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp — If
Equipped
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is
not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System low
tire pressure telltale.
4
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash one and
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
conditions is removed and reset.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
CAUTION!
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) has
been optimized for the original equipment tires and
wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on your ve-
hicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor dam-
age may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and / or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If this light is accompanied by a continuous
chime, the engine temperature is critically hot, and
the vehicle should be turned off immediately. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
25. Liftgate Ajar — If Equipped
This light turns on if the liftgate is not com-
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster both
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. They should both go out with the engine
running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or both. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
pletely closed.
26. Door Ajar Light — If Equipped
This light turns on if a door is not completely
closed.
4
27. Washer Fluid Light — If Equipped
This light turns on when the washer fluid level
falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will
remain on until fluid is added.
The “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp”:
— The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light — If
Equipped
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com-
bined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” and the yellow
— Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will
stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESP activation.
is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
30. All-Wheel-Drive Failure Indicator Light — If AWD
equipped
29. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC.) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) system.
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing
when the engine is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the ignition
When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD
system soon.
When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
•
LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON (with a continuous
warning chime)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) con-
sists of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INVALID KEY & FOB (with a single chime)
PARK ASSIST DISABLED
•
•
•
•
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
Customer programmable features
Compass display
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
4
SERVICE IMMOBILIZER (with a single chime)
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW (with a single chime)
KEY & FOB PROGRAMMED (with a single chime)
PROGRAM KEY & FOB
Mini-Trip functions
Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed
programming features. Pressing the STEP button will
display the available choices. Pressing the MENU button
a second time accepts a selected choice.
MEMORY #1/#2 POSITION SET (with a single chime)
MEMORY #1/#2 POS SELECTED
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK (with a single chime)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION (with a single chime)
FOB LINKED (with a single chime)
•
•
LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
FOB UNLINKED (with a single chime)
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED (with a single chime)
LOW BRAKE FLUID (with a single chime)
LOW FUEL (with a single chime)
•
•
•
DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime)
DOOR(S) AND GATE AJAR (with a single chime)
LIFT GATE AJAR (with a single chime if speed is
above 1 mph)
MENU IN PARK ONLY
LIST # ALERT MESSAGES
•
•
•
•
•
•
WASHER FLUID LOW (with a single chime)
UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
PERFORM SERVICE (with a single chime)
PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED
PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRANSMIT (with a single chime)
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINING (with a single chime)
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINED (with a single chime)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
•
•
•
•
•
CLEARING CHANNELS
CHANNELS CLEARED
CHANNELS DEFAULTED
DID NOT TRAIN
Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped
Press the MENU button until one of the following
display choices appears:
Language?
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions and navigation system. Press the
STEP button while in this display selects English,
Francais, or Espanol. As you continue the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE (Refer to ”Tire
Pressure Monitor System” in the “Starting And Oper-
ating, Tire Section”)
4
•
•
CHECK TPM SYSTEM (Refer to ”Tire Pressure Monitor
System” in the “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”)
Park Assist System? ON/OFF
When this feature is selected the system scans for objects
behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear
bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches (150
cm). Pressing the “STEP” button while in this display will
disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System. The EVIC will
display the following message: PARK ASSIST DISABLED
after the feature has been disabled and SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a problem with the system.
TCS SUSPENDED (Traction Control System, with a
graphic and single chime)
•
•
TCS ACTIVE (Traction Control System, with a graphic)
SERVICE TCS SYSTEM (Traction Control System, with
a graphic and single chime)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display U.S. or Metric?
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st?
Pressing the US/M button will change the EVIC, odom-
eter, navigation system and A/C Control units from US
to Metric.
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock
button and require a second press to unlock the remaining
locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL
DOORS is selected all of the doors and the liftgate will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock
button. Pressing the STEP button when in this display will
select DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS.
Use factory Settings?
When in this display you may select to use the factory
settings and no programmable features will be offered.
Auto Door Locks?
When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with
Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the door mounted switch.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
“Yes” or “No.”
Auto Unlock On Exit?
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will
unlock when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Sound Horn On Lock?
Headlamp On With Wipers? (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has at least once been moved to the AUTO position, the
headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds
when the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on in this way. Pressing the STEP button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?
4
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected a service interval between
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000 km) in 500
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select distances
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry Easy
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.” The seat will return to the
memorized seat location (if REMOTE LINK TO MEMORY
is set to YES) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is
used to unlock the door. For more information refer to
“Easy Entry/Exit Seat in the Driver Memory Seat section.
Power Accessory Delay?
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this
feature.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse? (Available with Memory
Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
ЉYesЉ or ЉNoЉ.
Easy Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Compass Display — If Equipped
Manual Compass Calibration
This display provides one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
If the compass appears erratic and the “COMPASS CALI-
BRATING” message does not appear in the EVIC display,
you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode
manually.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “COMPASS CALIBRATING” until the compass
is calibrated. The compass will calibrate automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if no buttons are pressed
and the vehicle is in Park. You may also calibrate the
compass by completing three, 360° turns in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects, the “COMPASS
CALIBRATING” EVIC message will turn off and the
compass will function normally.
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch and set the display to Compass. Press the RESET
button for at least 10 seconds until the “COMPASS
CALIBRATING” message appears. Release the MENU
button and complete three, 360° turns in an area free from
large metal objects. The “COMPASS CALIBRATING”
message will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set
the display to Compass. Press the MENU button for
approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds.
The “COMPASS VARIANCE” message and the last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the
map. Press the RESET button to set the new variance
zone and resume normal operation.
•
Off Mode
Shows a blank display.
•
Step Button
Push this button to cycle through all the Mini-trip
functions.
To Reset The Display
4
Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear
the resettable function currently being displayed. The
resettable function is average fuel economy. Reset will
only occur if the resettable function is currently being
displayed.
Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped
This displays information on the following:
•
Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed
on reset is 0.3 mpg.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is
accurately maintained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Electrical Disturbances
FM Reception
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
AM Reception
4
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAH—AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
RAH radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Radio Display
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adult Hit
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Inform
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
4
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Language
News
Weather
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
R & B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to adjust the balance.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Fade
Seek
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to adjust the fade balance.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Tone Control
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
4
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
CD Player Operation
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
•
This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Seek
RND — Random Play
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
EJT — Eject
4
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Maximum number of files: 255
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Maximum number of folders: 100
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a 3
character extension)
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a 3
character extension)
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG Specifi-
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
cation
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
4
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 files
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK Ϫ button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Switches back to Radio mode.
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
4
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) section of the
Owner’s Manual.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REV AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
REV Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Radio Display
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adult Hit
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Inform
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
4
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Language
News
Weather
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
R & B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to adjust the balance.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Fade
Seek
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to adjust the fade balance.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Tone Control
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK Ϫ to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
4
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
CD Player Operation
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
•
This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Seek
RND — Random Play
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
EJT — Eject
4
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Maximum number of files: 255
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Maximum number of folders: 100
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a 3
character extension)
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a 3
character extension)
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG Specifi-
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
cation
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
4
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 files
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK Ϫ button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System allows passengers to
listen to a CD or DVD from the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
through wireless headphones, while the front seat pas-
sengers listen to either AM/FM, Cassette or CDs from the
radio speakers. A remote control is provided for func-
tions such as changing tracks or DVD functions, as well
as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
while listening to the Rear Audio/Video System.
4
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System may be available in a
base and premium version. The premium version in-
cludes a six disc changer, remote control and two sets of
wireless headphones. The base version includes a single
disc player and remote control.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The CD/DVD Changer will play CD-R, CD-RW, CD-
Audio and DVD Video disc formats. The video screen
will turn on automatically once a DVD is inserted into the
changer.
Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer
Loading The CD/DVD Changer
The premium version has a multi-disc changer,
and will accept up to six discs. The base
version is a single-disc player, and will only
accept one disc.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position before the CD/DVD changer will operate.
To insert disc(s) into the changer, follow the instructions
shown:
1. On vehicles equipped with the premium version,
select and press any numbered button without an illumi-
nated light above it.
2. Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while
the light below the loading slot is illuminated. On
vehicles equipped with the premium version the light
above the chosen button will also be flashing, indicating
Six Disc DVD Changer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
which numbered position the disc will be loaded into.
The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD/DVD
changer.
play from the menu options. The radio display will show
the chapter number and index time in hours and minutes
of the DVD, or the track number, minutes and second of
the CD.
3. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the
light below the loading slot will turn off. On vehicles
equipped with the premium version the light above the
chosen button will remain illuminated.
NOTE:
•
•
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
4
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the DVD will automatically be pulled into the
DVD changer and the display will show the time of
day.
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CD/
DVDs into the premium version multi-disc changer. The
CD/DVD changer will stop while additional CD/DVDs
are loaded.
•
It is recommended to label home made burned discs
with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels.
These types of labels may become loose and cause the
disc to be stuck in the DVD player. This may cause
permanent damage to the DVD mechanism.
If the radio volume control is ON, the unit will switch
from radio to CD/DVD mode and the video screen will
turn on. If the DVD supports the autoplay feature, play
will begin automatically in approximately 10 seconds,
after the DVD disc menu is displayed. If the DVD does
not play automatically, press the ENTER button on the
remote control or on the side of the video screen to select
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the changer, press the EJT button and
the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc within 10
seconds, it will be reloaded and the display will show
PAUSE. The radio mode will continue to operate.
To eject additional discs from the premium version
multi-disc changer, first select the numbered button
where the disc is located and then press the EJT button.
Operating Instructions — Remote Control
NOTE: Aim the remote control at the radio located on
the center of the instrument panel and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of
sight may affect the function of the remote control.
Remote Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Remote Control Buttons
1. Headphone Transmitter
2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter
3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind
4. Return
5. Setup
6. Pause/Play
7. Mute
8. Display
Remote Control Buttons
17. Enter
18. Light
Headphone Transmitter Button (1)
The headphone transmitter button on the remote control
and the power button on the headphones must be turned
ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On
some radios the headphone symbol will flash for ap-
proximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the
headphones are in use.
4
9. Mode
ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)
10. Program Down - Previous Disc
11. Program Up - Next Disc
12. Slow
These arrow buttons only function in CD/ DVD mode.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu
screen options.
13. Stop
14. Menu
15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter
16. Menu Right/Fast Forward
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RTN Button (4)
PAUSE/PLAY Button (6)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press this
button to return to the previous menu when in the disc
menu mode.
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button once to pause the video, press a second time to
play the video.
SETUP Button (5)
MUTE Button (7)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press the
button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up
menu. Use the right and left arrows to move between
tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and aspect. Use the
up and down arrows to move between options within
each tab.
No function.
DISP Button (8)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a
DVD video is playing, press this button to display the
play menu options.
MODE Button (9)
This button changes between available modes and can be
heard in the headphones.
To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This
should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using
the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up
or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press
ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to
playing the CD/DVD or Menu to return to the disc
menu.
PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)
PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer.
PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the
changer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
SLOW Button (12)
chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button
up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused,
pressing this button will advance the video frame by
frame.
FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD
changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is
released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar
manner.
STOP Button (13)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to stop the DVD.
4
ENTER Button (17)
MENU Button (14)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to select the DVD disc menu.
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the
ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen
options.
NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15)
Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next
chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or
PREV button to return to the beginning of the current
chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button
twice within two seconds to return to the previous
Light Button (18)
Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the re-
mote control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Control Battery Service
•
To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the
cover rearward.
The replacement batteries for the remote control are two
AAA batteries.
Operating Instructions — Video Screen
Push up on the release button to lower the video screen.
Screen handle
1. Screen Width Button
Changes the width of the screen picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
2. Enter Button
This button will enter the selection from the
on-screen menu.
3. Brightness Button
Changes the brightness of the screen picture.
4
Screen Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Headphones
Power Button
Pressing the power button will turn the headphones
ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the head-
phone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
NOTE:
•
The headphones will turn off automatically in ap-
proximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the
system or when the radio or rear audio/video system
is turned off.
Volume Control
Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the
desired listening level.
Rear Headphones
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Headphone Battery Service
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
•
Press the button at the bottom of each headphone
earpiece and lift the cover upward.
4
If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones,
check for the following conditions:
1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are
on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the
remote control and the power button on the headphones.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone
earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
Headphone Battery Service
2. Weak batteries in the headphones.
•
Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the
cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight
between the headphone transmitter on the video screen
and the headphones.
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC
adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any
power outlet.
Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman
Follow the manufactures instructions for the correct
colors when connecting the RCA cables.
An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system.
Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front
of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: MP3 player’s, video game systems, camcorders
connected to the RCA jacks and CD’s or DVD’s inserted
into the radio, can be heard through the headphones or
the cabin when AUX Mode is selected.
NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the
correct colors when connecting the RCA cables.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. The buttons to operate
the system are located on the instrument panel next to the
analog clock.
Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders
A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the
rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA
jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.
Refer to your Navigation User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor
storage compartment in the rear cargo area. A single disc
containing map information for the entire United States
and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit. Updated
DVD’s are available from your authorized dealer.
To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin
cover and liner in the rear cargo area, press the eject
button and the disc will eject. Gently insert the new disc
into the DVD unit with the label facing up. The disc will
automatically be pulled into the DVD unit.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
4
Navigation DVD Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Activation
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend-
ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
•
The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK
Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ЉS AЉ appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
4
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
ЉSIRIUSЉ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
•
•
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ
button a second time to stop the search.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped)
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Satellite Antenna
•
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
4
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch
will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button
changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to
Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center. The function of the left hand switch is different
depending on which mode you are in.
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
operation in each mode:
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
The button located in the center of the left hand switch
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
Tape Player
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
4
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flat to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
second time the indicator light turns off, the blower will
turn off and the system will be positioned in the recircu-
lation mode.
Blower Control
The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to
the passenger compartment. There are four blower
speeds.
4
The fan speed increases as you
move the control clockwise.
Manual Heating and A/C Controls
Power Button
When the “POWER” button is pressed the indicator will
illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected
by the front blower control. When the button is pressed a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
DUAL ZONE TEMP CONTROL
This is accomplished by having a separate temperature
control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center
outlets down, will close off the air flow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these
outlets.
4
Panel Outlets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bi-
level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Bi-Level Outlets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
4
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keep-
ing the windshield clear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Mode
Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in
drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows
from fogging.
Manual Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the front
blower control to any speed and press the A/C
button which is located next to the recirculation
button. An indicator light on the A/C button shows that
the air conditioning is on.
NOTE: The indicator light in the “POWER” button must
be on for the climate control system to operate.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected
by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning,
press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light
will turn off.
Defrost Outlets
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows.
NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated
and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
NOTE:
Recirculation Control
•
The compressor will not engage until the engine has
been running for a few seconds.
Press the recirculation button to recirculate the
air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the
A/C button. An indicator light on the button
shows that air is being recirculated. Use the
recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the
vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the A/C air filter (ATC equipped
vehicles only) and the front of the A/C condenser for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. The A/C condenser
is located in front of the radiator. The A/C air filter is
located under the instrument panel on the passenger
side.
4
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recircula-
tion feature will be cancelled.
•
Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount
of air to the condenser and may reduce air condition-
ing performance.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
selected.
Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix
or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation
button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is
not allowed.
•
•
•
•
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Set the mode control to “PANEL”.
Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
A/C Recirculation Programming
Start the engine, and continue to hold in the “POWER”
button until the indicator light starts flashing repeat-
edly.
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key
is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help
keep odors from building up within the air conditioner-
heater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation
mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid
climates.
•
•
Press the recirculation button until the indicator light
remains lit.
The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is
turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the
recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation
mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine
is started. The programmed status can be changed back
and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
System automatically maintains the interior comfort level
desired by the driver and front seat passenger. This is
accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in
the center of the instrument panel. The two infrared
sensors independently measure the surface temperature
of the driver and front seat passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, the airflow distribu-
tion, and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain
front seat occupant comfort, even under changing out-
side weather conditions.
4
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
To operate the system, press either the ЉAUTO HIЉ or
ЉAUTO LOЉ buttons. The system now automatically
regulates the heating and air conditioning system includ-
ing blower speed, outlet air temperature, and airflow
distribution through the various outlets within the in-
strument panel. Using the ЉTEMPЉ buttons, adjust the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
temperature you would like the system to maintain.
When the system is set to your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function
automatically. The system will operate fully automati-
cally in either ЉAUTO HIЉ or ЉAUTO LOЉ. The ЉAUTO
LOЉ setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should
be used when more quiet operation is desired. Use the
ЉAUTO HIЉ setting when the quickest cool-down or
warm-up performance is desired.
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center-
Customer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
off and “DELAY” will appear in the display until the
engine warms up. An estimate of the time remaining
until the “DELAY” is complete will appear periodically
in the display. However, the fan will engage immediately
if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower
switch and manually adjusting the fan speed.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
This feature may be disabled using the following proce-
dure:
•
•
Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO
buttons for 5 seconds.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been disabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
This feature may be enabled using the following proce-
dure:
left and right side of the instrument panel. The outside
temperature will replace the passenger’s temperature
setting in the display. Pressing the ЉDUALЉ button a
second time or adjusting the passenger’s ЉTEMPЉ button
will return the system to dual independent temperature
operation.
•
•
Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI
buttons for 5 seconds.
The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been enabled.
Manual Operation
4
Power Button
This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the
system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The indicator light in both the ЉAUTO HIЉ or
ЉAUTO LOЉ buttons will turn off when the system is
being used in the manual mode. The fan speed, airflow
distribution, and outside air/recirculated air can be
manually adjusted.
Dual/Single Zone Operation
When ЉDUALЉ is displayed in the ATC control unit, the
driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be
individually adjusted from the two independent ЉTEMPЉ
buttons. When a front seat passenger is not present,
pressing the ЉDUALЉ button will match the passenger’s
temperature setting to the driver’s temperature setting.
This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The front blower control can be set to any fixed
blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or
down. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto
mode. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected or until either the ЉAUTO
HIЉ or ЉAUTO LOЉ buttons are pressed. The system will
continue to automatically adjust air temperature and
airflow distribution.
Panel Mode
The operator can also select the direction of the air by
pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the
left of the A/C button and selecting one of the following
positions.
Panel Outlets
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the knob up, down, left, or right will direct the
air accordingly. The thumbwheel next to each outlet can be
rotated to reduce or shut off the air flow from these outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
Bi-Level Outlets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Floor Outlets
Mix Outlets
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode is not used when operating in
either ЉAUTO HIЉ or ЉAUTO LOЉ. This mode should be
used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Defrost Mode
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
NOTE: While operating in ЉAUTO HIЉ or ЉAUTO LOЉ,
the system will not automatically sense the presence fog,
mist, or ice on the windshield. The defrost button must be
pressed to clear the windshield and side glass.
4
Depress the “A/C” button to turn on and off the
air conditioning during manual operation only.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets
selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air condi-
tioning, press the A/C button a second time. The A/C
symbol in the display will turn off.
Defrost Outlets
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows. If a fog or mist on the
NOTE: If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, press the “A/C” button to engage the com-
pressor or press the defrost button. If a fog or mist on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to the outside air mode when the ignition
key is turned “ON”. The frequent use of outside air will
help keep odors from building up within the air
conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the
recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially
in humid climates.
Recirculation Control
When the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the recirculation button. The recircu-
lation mode should only be used temporarily. The recir-
culate symbol will illuminate in the display when this
button is selected. Push the button a second time to allow
outside air into the vehicle.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
•
•
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Press and hold the recirculation button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
•
•
While holding the recirculation button, turn the igni-
tion switch to the “RUN” position.
switch located in the center console between the second
row seats. By pressing the ЉREARЉ button a third time,
the rear fan will shut off.
Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 sec-
onds, then release.
When the ATC display reads ЉREAR AUTOЉ or when the
rear fan is off, the switch located in the center console
between the second row seats is not functional. When the
ATC display reads ЉREARЉ, only the rear seat occupants
can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch. When
in the “REAR” mode, the rear occupants can set the rear
switch to any fan speed including ЉOFFЉ, or ЉAUTOЉ.
While in the ЉAUTOЉ position, the rear fan speed will be
automatically controlled.
The recirculation control is now programmed so that the
recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode
when the engine is restarted. The recirculation program-
ming can be changed back by repeating this procedure.
4
Rear Blower Operation
To operate the rear fan, press the ЉREARЉ button. The first
time this button is pressed the ЉREAR AUTOЉ display
will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is
automatically controlled. To manually control the rear
fan speed, press the ЉREARЉ button again and only
ЉREARЉ will illuminate in the display. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the rear fan speed using the
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Winter Operation
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the A/C
button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle.
To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance
Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly
removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing
the blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A/C
button for long periods as fogging may occur.
Vacation Storage
Outside Air Intake
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
Before driving, always make sure the air intake located
directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions
such as leaves, ice, or snow, which could reduce airflow
and/or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window
defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off
after about 10 minutes of operation.
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to section 7 “Air Conditioning”
for filter replacement instructions.
CAUTION!
Outside Temperature Display
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC
display by pressing the ЉOUTSIDE TEMPЉ button. After
pressing this button, the front seat passenger’s tempera-
ture setting display will be replaced with the current
outside temperature. Press the ЉOUTSIDE TEMPЉ button
again or press the passenger’s ЉTEMPЉ button to return
the display to the passenger’s temperature setting.
4
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors. A light in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause ex-
cessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire which may cause seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
•
•
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below Ϫ20°F /
–29°C)
Normal Starting (Above 32°F / 0°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting
Process” as shown above.
1. Do not depress the accelerator.
2. Turn and hold the ignition key in the START position
and release when engine starts.
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
5
3. If engine does not start after 3 seconds, depress the
accelerator lightly (while still cranking the engine).
High Altitude Starting (Above 4,000 ft. / 1 219 m)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting
Process” as shown above.
4. If engine does not start after 15 seconds, turn the
ignition key off.
5. Wait 10 to 15 seconds, and repeat steps 1 — 5 shown
above.
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.
5
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON
position.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
5
Four Speed Automatic Transmission
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. Always
depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear
selector out of PARK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into sec-
ond gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R),
and Neutral (N) will continue to operate. This Reset
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
•
•
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine.
Shift into the desired range and resume driving.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the park position
without pressing the brake. After operation return the
shifter bezel ring to its original position.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for
the interlock system. In order to override this system the
key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or
ON positions. Pull up and rearward on the shifter bezel
ring.
5
The override can be activated by pressing the pink-
colored tab, which can be accessed through the lower
right corner of the shifter bezel ring. While the override is
Brake Interlock Override
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
AUTOSTICK
Engine may be started in this range.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
“D” Overdrive
To be used for most city and highway driving, it provides
smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel
economy. When frequent transmission shifting occurs
while using the “D” Overdrive position, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode and
select the “3” range.
AutoStick Operation
The AutoStick position is just below the Overdrive posi-
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the AutoStick position, it can
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display, located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: Using the “3” range in the AutoStick mode
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
ate automatically; shifting between the four available
gears. When you wish to engage AutoStick, simply move
the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transmis-
sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
•
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
•
•
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the AutoStick mode.
While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will only
function in third or fourth gear.
5
AutoStick General Information
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
•
The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
If the system detects a problem it will disable the
AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel
Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under nor-
mal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,
power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
power transfer to the rear wheels.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on
the parking brake release located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
5
Parking Brake Release
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
•
•
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Anti-Lock Brake System
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
5
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
•
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
brake pedal pulsations,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) and ESP
(Electronic Stability Program). All systems work together
to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
The ESP system enhances directional control and stabil-
ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to
determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESP
5
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the Over-steer or Under-steer condition.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
•
•
Over-steer: when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer: when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
ESP has the following operating modes:
required to gain traction. To turn ESP on again, mo-
mentarily depress the “ESP Control Switch”. This will
restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
•
ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP.
Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be
in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
driving situations. ESP should only be turned to
“Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily
depressing the “ESP Control Switch”. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESP, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will
be illuminated. All other stability features of ESP
function normally, with the exception of engine power
reduction. This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is
5
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
TRACTION CONTROL
The system is always in the “stand by” mode unless,
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
•
The ESP “OFF” Switch has been used to turn the
system OFF
5
The Traction Control System reduces wheel slip and
maintains traction at the driving (front) wheels. The
system reduces wheel slip by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction (spinning). The system will
operate at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
Traction Control Switch
•
There is a Traction Control System malfunction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The system has been deactivated to prevent damage to
the brake system due to overheated brake tempera-
tures
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
NOTE:
•
The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
•
Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the
system to deactivate and turn on the traction control
indicator located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and
is a normal condition. The system will remain disabled
for about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The
system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
traction control indicator.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
•
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow,
turn the Traction Control System OFF before at-
tempting to “rock” the vehicle free.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
WARNING!
Acceleration
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
CAUTION!
5
WARNING!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
NOTE:
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
•
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage
that result in tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
5
Tire Pressure
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling
resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
5
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
WARNING!
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of un-
approved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting
in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
5
•
•
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
the chain before further use.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
•
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
1
then retighten after driving about
⁄2
mile (0.8 km).
•
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, they
should be used on all four tires.
•
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended
by the manufacture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
5
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. (The
placard is located on the drivers side ”B” Pillar).
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
•
The tire pressure will vary with the temperature by
about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
NOTE: Refer to Tires — General Information in this
section for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
•
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning thresh-
old for any reason, including low temperature effects.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Base System without
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING THE SPARE
TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-
ceiver Module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long
as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the
tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning telltale
has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be in-
creased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning
telltale to be turned off. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
warning telltale will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received.
5
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main-
tain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
•
•
•
Receiver Module
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
4 Wheel Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an
audible chime will be activated when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are
low. The audible chime will sound once every ignition
cycle for each low tire condition that it detects.
NOTE: A low spare or compact tire pressure will not
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp
to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System with
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING THE SPARE
TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Re-
ceiver Module.
Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the
vehicle tire pressure placard. The system will automati-
cally update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s)
have been received.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main-
tain the proper pressure.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the
vehicle tire pressure placard. The system will automati-
cally update, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Lamp
will extinguish once the updated tire pressure have been
received.
•
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
5
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each low tire condition that it
detects. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display the number of tire(s) that are
low, followed by the “Tire Low Pressure” text message.
NOTE: A low spare or compact tire pressure will not
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp
to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service Tire System Soon
CAUTION!
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 60 seconds in the instrument cluster, and an
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System has been op-
timized for the original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPM System, as damage to the sensors may result.
In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a “SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON”
text message. The flash cycle will repeat every ten
minutes, without an audible chime, until the condition no
longer exists. The flash cycle sequence will repeat and an
audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for
each condition that it detects.
NOTE: If a temporary spare tire is in use and none of
the remaining 3 active road tire pressures are low, a
“SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON textual message will
appear in the EVIC after 10 minutes of driving,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
•
•
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp.
NOTE:
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System does not monitor
the temporary spare tire.
5
Using Your Compact Spare — Basic Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Only
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and
tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. In the event that a compact
spare tire is used to replace a low pressure road tire, the
next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Monitoring Lamp to be ON, and a Chime will sound.
This sequence will repeat for every key cycle until the
original Tire Pressure Monitoring System tire has been
properly repaired (or replaced) and put back on the
vehicle in place of the compact spare tire.
•
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Wheel Sensors
Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules (mounted in three of
the four wheel wells)
Tire Pressure Monitoring Premium System – If
Equipped
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. The audible chime will
sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it
detects. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will show a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NOTE: A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the
chime to sound.
Service Tire System Soon
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 60 seconds in the instrument cluster, and an
audible chime when a system fault is detected. The flash
cycle will repeat every 10 minutes, without an audible
chime, until the fault condition not longer exists.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is/are flashing on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold plac-
ard pressure value. The system will automatically up-
date, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s)
have been received.
In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a “SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON”
text message for 3 seconds. This text message is then
followed by “— —”, for the pressure value indicating
which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not
being received.
5
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minuets above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. Iff the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Telltale Lamp will no longer flash, the “SERVICE TIRE
SYSTEM SOON” text message will no longer display,
and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. In the event that a
compact spare tire is used to replace a low pressure road
tire, the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Lamp to be ON, a Chime will
sound, and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will still show the low tire pressure value flashing
on the graphic display. This sequence will repeat for
every key cycle until the original Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) tire has been properly repaired (or
replaced) and put back on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) has
been optimized for the original equipment tires and
wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a
can, or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped
with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
General Information
CAUTION!
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE:
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is not
intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance,
nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
5
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
•
It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Lamp.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) should
not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting
your tire pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89 or higher. The
manufacturer recommends the use of 89
octane for optimum performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
MMT In Gasoline
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
CAUTION!
5
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
•
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
ADDING FUEL
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow “ 3
”indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel filler
door is located on, is located in the instrument
cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle long
enough to force open the restricting door.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn
on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
WARNING!
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indi-
cator light to turn on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NOTE:
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or dam-
aged, GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument
cluster odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly
and press the odometer reset button to turn the
GASCAP message off.
•
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
•
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See Section 7 of this
manual for more information. Make sure that the fuel
filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
5
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL— (Fleet Vehicles Only)
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
CAUTION!
Fuel Requirements
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to the “Maintenance Procedures” section of
this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil.
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
•
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F. In the range
of 0°F to 32°F, you may experience an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in
drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is
fully warmed up.
5
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-
ing start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cruising Range
Maintenance
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Vehicle Certification Label
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name of manufacturer
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of Vehicle
5
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Example Only
Empty Weight
Front Axle Rear Axle
2538 lbs
2076 lbs
(1151 kg) (942 kg )
Load (Including driver, pas-
sengers and cargo)
223 lbs
(101 kg)
890 lbs
(404 kg)
Total 2762 lbs
2968 lbs
(1253 kg) (1346 kg)
GAWR
2826 lbs
3035 lbs
(1282 kg) (1377 kg)
5
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include
a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Tongue Weight (TW)
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
5
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Weight Distributing Hitch System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
5
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.5L & 3.8L Auto-
matic
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
8,600 lbs (3900 kg)
40 SQ. FT.
40 SQ. FT.
40 SQ. FT.
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,500 lbs
(1600 kg)
3 to 4 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1360 kg)
5 to 6 persons &
Luggage 1,000 lbs
(454 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Towing Requirements
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
•
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ЉchockЉ the trailer wheels.
5
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
CAUTION!
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
before towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Highway Driving
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Hazard Flasher Switch
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of
the instrument panel above the center air outlets.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
6
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
Jack Location
Five Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located behind the second row bench seat. Pull up on
the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the
small wing nut to the left.
Six Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located in the rear cargo floor. Pull up on the storage
bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools.
6
Jack Wing Nut
Jack Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
Five Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at
the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Six Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the trim cover at the
center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor.
Lowering Spare Tire
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to
the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack
cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
•
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
6
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge
of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
•
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
facing the ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
1. Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack-handle
from stowage.
2. Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped,
using the tip of the jack handle.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6
4. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the body — refer to the following illustration.
Jack Engagement Locations
5. These locations are on the sill flange on the underside
of the body. The jack is to be located, engaging the
flanges, 20 cm (8 inches) inward from the edge of the
wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed. Place
the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until
the jack head is properly engaged in the described
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged. Never jack up the vehicle
using any suspension components.
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
8. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers,
align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on
the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only
and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
•
•
•
•
Turn the wheel so that the valve-stem is down. Slide
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel
and position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation,
stow with the valve-stem toward the rear of the
vehicle.
11. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
Using the jack-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle.
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mecha-
nism click three times. It cannot be overtightened.
Push against the tire several times to be sure it is
securely in place.
6
12. Secure the flat or spare tire as follows:
13. Stow the jack and jack handle.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with cast aluminum
wheels, the center cap of the wheel must be re-
moved prior to flat tire stowage. Store the center cap
inside the glove box or other storage compartment.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When reinstalling the wheel center cap, insure
that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is
pointed toward the wheel valve stem. Install the center
cap using hand pressure only. Do not use a hammer.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be
started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage
the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged
battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs).
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery
fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery
when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other.
If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
•
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. Do
not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an
output that exceeds 12 volts.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood
is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can
be hurt by the fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),
DO NOT jump-start the battery.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
proceed as follows:
WARNING!
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
6
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump start.
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WARNING!
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Front Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
ground. Exceeding these towing limits may cause a
transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100
miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
6
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
All Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions:
The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), the towing
speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h), and both front
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
and rear wheels must be on the ground. If your vehicle
must be towed farther or at a higher rate of speed, it must
be transported on a flat bed truck.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
All Transmissions
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method
of towing is with a flat bed truck.
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
•
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) or front wheel drive vehicle on a
tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
cap until a ЉclickingЉ sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
7
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an
expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include
detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these
manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
Engine Oil
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Change Engine Oil
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and Go driving.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Extensive engine idling.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
Engine Oil Selection
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
7
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-Road or desert operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0 Liter
Engines
The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be
selected based on the following recommendation and be
within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil
viscosity chart.
•
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred. SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is allowed during cold weather only to improve
cold weather starting.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.8 Liter
Engines
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
7
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa-
tion” label in the engine compartment.
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts should be checked for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con-
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing, and replaced if there is indication of damage
which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt
tension can cause battery failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
7
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
frame with the direction of airflow (away from the
blower motor and towards the center of the car).
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.Љ
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter access door is located under the instrument
panel on the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the
lock toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position).
Remove the access door and pull the filter downward.
When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orienta-
tion. Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Steering Shaft Seal
WARNING!
The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.
Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Peri-
odic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed. No
regular maintenance is required for these components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer-
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
7
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Coolant Checks
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
Adding Engine Coolant
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year / 100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.
7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
Engine Coolant Level
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the coolant level in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
7
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings
to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Schedules.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
WARNING!
7
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conven-
tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the dipstick hole in the case.
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-
sion fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and of the fluid.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
7
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
Severe Usage is defined as:
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte-
nance Schedules.
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to
aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission
sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect
seals.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid should be changed on all
transmissions as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
Rear Carrier
Under normal operating conditions, periodic fluid level
checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer Unit
and Rear Carrier, are not required. However when the
vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surface
of these components should be inspected for evidence of
fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon
as possible.
The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier
housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even
with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is
parked on a level surface. if it becomes necessary to add
or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recom-
mended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Power Transfer Unit
Fluid Changes
The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer
unit housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the
vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes neces-
sary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufac-
turers recommended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
The fluid should be changed as follows:
Normal Usage
No Service Required
Severe Usage
Service Required
7
Power Transfer Unit
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Rear Carrier
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Severe Usage is defined as:
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go
traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
in construction zone traffic,
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte-
nance Schedules.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
The most common causes are:
•
•
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
Washing
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
7
Special Care
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Interior Care
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then Mopar
Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total Clean to
clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Interior Fabric Upholstery
Your interior seat Yes Essentials™ fabric upholstery
should be cleaned in the following manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
•
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
For tough stains in fabrics, apply Mopar Total Clean to
a clean cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
•
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
7
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Seat Belt Maintenance
Cleaning
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Installation
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
Removal
7
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder
and lift upward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Description
1
40 Amp
Green
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump
2
3
Spare
30 Amp
Pink
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
4
5
6
7
8
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 1
Electronic Back Light (EBL)
Front Wipers
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
Starter
An Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
tains maxi fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that
identifies each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
40 Amp
Green
Power Seat C/B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Description
Power Sunroof
Cavity
42
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
Description
9
Front Blower
10
11
Spare
40 Amp
Green
Spare
40 Amp
Green
Spare
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Cavity
24
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet (Selectable)
low
15 Amp Blue Radio, Amplifier, Naviga-
tion, Hands-Free Phone
Description
Headlight Washer, Power
Liftgate
12
13
25
Radiator Fan 1
(HFM), Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),
EC, SNRF, Mirror
14
15
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module
Driver Door Node
7
26
20 Amp Yel- Power Outlet
low
Spare
25 Amp
Natural
40
41
27
28
Passenger Door Node
Horn
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
29
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yel- Cluster, CHMSL, Stop
low
Description
Cavity
44
Mini Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Ignition Run
20 Amp Yel- Passenger Door
low
20 Amp Yel- Driver Door
low
15 Amp Blue PLG, OHC, Body Control
Module (BCM), Naviga-
tion, Hands-Free Phone
(HFM)
Description
Rear Heated Seats
Lights, Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
45
46
47
48
30
31
10 Amp Red Ignition Switch
20 Amp Yel- Hazard
low
Spare
Spare
20 Amp Yel- Electronic Automatic
low
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp Yel- Fuel Pump
low
34
35
36
Transaxle (EATX) Solenoid
ASD
37
38
39
49
50
25 Amp
Natural
Amplifier
15 Amp Blue HVAC, DVD, RAD, CLK,
SKREEM
20 Amp Yel- A/C Clutch, MTV
low
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
VEHICLE STORAGE
CAUTION!
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
•
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
•
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Rear Stop, Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Standard Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Center & Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Front Door Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Liftgate Light(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 212–2
Visor Vanity Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace-
ment instructions.
BULB REPLACEMENT
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Standard Quad Headlights
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod-
ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
the lower attachment clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the rubber boot seals.
7
4. Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb.
Reinstall the rubber boot seals and then the headlight
module.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight
module and pull the bulb from socket.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights
3. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and then reinstall
the headlight module.
1. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod-
ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
the lower attachment clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
Front Fog Light
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Back-up Lights
1. Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog
light bulb.
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog
light module.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate
the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the
attaching grommet.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the
housing.
License Light
1. Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab
and push on the release tab to remove the lens.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and
push on the lens until it snaps into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel
23 gallons
87 liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
4.0 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.5 qts
5.0 qts
5.2 liters
4.7 liters
Cooling System *
4.0 Liter Engines (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
10.7 qts
11.8 qts
10.1 liters
11.2 liters
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.8 Liter Engines (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent
4.0 Liter Engine Oil
3.8 Liter Engine Oil
Spark Plugs
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil, refer to oil viscosity chart for cor-
rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Oil Filter, 4.0/3.8 Liter Engines
Fuel Selection
Mopar 5281090 or equiv.
89 Octane
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission
AWD Power Transfer Unit
AWD Rear Carrier
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Mopar Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
MoparPower Steering Fluid +4 or MoparATF +4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
S
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.छ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417
•
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).छ
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
N
T
E
Off-road or desert operation.
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
S
C
H
E
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ.
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
U
L
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ЉBЉ.
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
S
8
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
N
T
•
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
E
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
nents.
Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
cylinder and transmission, add as needed.
S
C
H
E
•
•
Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 419
SCHEDULE “B”
•
•
Trailer towing.छ
N
T
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under
one or more of the conditions marked with an छ.
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
E
vice).छ
N
A
N
C
E
•
Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ЉAЉ of the ЉMainte-
nance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
D
U
L
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
S
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
420 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power
transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
chart)
3, 000
6, 000
9, 000
12, 000
(19 000)
15, 000
(24 000) (29 000)
18, 000
N
T
(5 000 ) (10 000 ) (14 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Replace the air conditioning filter.
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 421
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power
transfer unit fluid. (See note at the end of this
chart)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier
fluid. (See the note at the end of this chart)
21, 000
24, 000
27, 000
30, 000
33, 000
36, 000
N
T
(34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000) (53 000)
(58 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
8
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
422 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer
unit fluid. (See the note at the end of this
chart.)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear car-
rier fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
39, 000
42, 000
45, 000
48, 000
51, 000
54, 000
(86 000)
N
T
(62 000) (67 000) (72 000) (77 000) (82 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 423
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer unit
fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier fluid.
(See note at the end of this chart)
57, 000 60, 000
63, 000
66, 000
69, 000
72, 000
N
T
(91 000) (96 000) (101 000) (106 000) (110 000) (115 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
424 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not re-
quired if previously changed.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Change the All Wheel Drive power transfer unit fluid.
(See the note at the end of this chart.)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier fluid.
(See note at the end of this chart)
75, 000
78, 000
81, 000
84, 000
87, 000
90, 000
N
T
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000) (144 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
E
X
X
X
X
S
8
X
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 425
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter
Replace engine timing belt.
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer unit
fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
93, 000
96, 000
99, 000 100, 000 102, 000 105, 000
(149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000) (168 000)
N
T
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
*
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier fluid.
(See note at the end of this chart)
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
X
X
E
S
8
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
Engine Coolant — Flush and replace at 5 years of 100,000
miles whichever occurs first.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
426 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
108, 000
(173 000)
111, 000
(178 000)
X
114, 000
(182 000)
117, 000
(187 000)
X
120, 000
(192 000)
N
T
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces-
sary. ‡
E
S
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
X
X
8
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 427
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces-
sary. ‡
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
123, 000
(197 000)
X
126, 000
(202 000)
129, 000
(206 000)
X
132, 000
(211 000)
135, 000
(216 000)
X
N
T
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
E
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier
fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
S
8
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
428 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces-
sary. ‡
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
138, 000
(221 000)
141, 000
(226 000)
X
144, 000
(230 000)
147, 000
(235 000)
X
150, 000
(240 000)
N
T
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
E
S
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) power transfer
unit fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 429
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the All Wheel Drive (AWD) rear carrier
fluid. (See note at the end of this chart)
Replace the air conditioning filter.
138, 000
(221 000)
141, 000
(226 000)
144, 000
(230 000)
147, 000
150, 000
N
T
(235 000)
X
(240 000)
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
NOTE: The AWD power transfer unit fluid and the
AWD rear carrier fluid must be changed at the more
frequent intervals shown in schedule B if the vehicle is
operated under any of the conditions noted by a dia-
mond (छ) at the beginning of the schedule.
S
C
H
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
D
U
L
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
430 SCHEDULE “A”
SCHEDULE “A”
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
6, 000
(10 000)
12, 000
(19 000)
[12]
18, 000
(29 000)
[18]
X
24, 000
30, 000
36, 000
E
(38 000 ) (48 000) (58 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[6]
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 431
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
42, 000
(67 000)
[42]
48, 000
(77 000)
[48]
54, 000
(86 000)
[54]
X
X
60, 000
66, 000
72, 000
N
T
(96 000) (106 000) (115 000)
E
[60]
X
X
[66]
X
[72]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front
& Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace, if neces-
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
X
E
S
sary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if nec-
essary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60
months or 100,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
X
X
8
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
432 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
78, 000
(125 000)
84, 000
(134 000)
90, 000
(144 000)
96, 000
(154 000)
100, 000
(160 000)
N
T
E
[78]
X
X
[84]
X
X
[90]
X
X
[96]
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front &
Rear)
Check and replace the PCV valve , if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if neces-
sary. ‡
Replace the spark plugs.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months
or 100,000 miles, whichever comes first.
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
8
X
X
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 433
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
102, 000
(163 000)
[102]
X
108, 000
(173 000)
[108]
X
X
114, 000
(182 000)
[114]
X
120, 000
(192 000)
[120]
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace engine timing belt.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not
done at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
X
E
S
X
8
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
434 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate Tires
Inspect the brake linings.
126, 000
(202 000)
[126]
X
X
132, 000
(211 000)
[132]
X
138, 000
(221 000)
[138]
X
144, 000
(230 000)
[144]
X
X
150, 000
(240, 000)
[150]
X
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. (Front & Rear)
Check the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Inspect the serpentine drive belt, replace if necessary. ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
X
E
S
8
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a
malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 435
WARNING!
N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
•
•
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
MOPARா PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In Canada:
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
•
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443
Call Toll Free at:
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
•
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
Traction Grades
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 447
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,274
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,389
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
448 INDEX
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,200
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 449
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
450 INDEX
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,411,412
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 451
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,413
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
452 INDEX
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,411
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 453
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388,391
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
454 INDEX
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,186,409
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,406,407
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,74
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,133
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,65,80,188
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 455
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
456 INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,412
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,411
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,373,411
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 457
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,115
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
458 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 459
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,115
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
460 INDEX
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,379
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,405
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,297,443
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 461
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,297
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,358
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,270
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,274
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
462 INDEX
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
